(الكاميرا: الإصدار 1.00 و1.01، وحدة التحكم: الإصدار 1.00)

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsDigital CameraEX-FR10

.ﺍﺬﻫ

CASIO

ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟ ﻙءﺍﺮﺷ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻙﺮﻜﺸﻧ

•.ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻲﻓ ﺓﺩﺭﺍﻮﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﻻﺍ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ ﻖﻘﺤﺗ

•.

ﻼﺒﻘﺘﺴﻣ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻠﻟ ﻦﻣﺁ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ

• ﻰﻠﻋ ﻲﻤﺳﺮﻟﺍ

EXILIM

ﻊﻗﻮﻣ ﺓﺭﺎﻳﺰﺑ ﻢﻗ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻬﺑ ﺔﻘﻠﻌﺘﻤﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﺙﺪﺣﺃ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻉﻼﻃﻺﻟ

http://www.exilim.com/

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (119 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪2.....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ! ‪3..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪7......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪8...................................................................
PAGE 5
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) .................................................‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪48 .....‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ............................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪49 .....‬‬ ‫❚❙ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪50 .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪51 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪52 ..............
PAGE 6
‫❚❙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪73 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪73 ............................................ Windows‬‬ ‫❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪74 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪76 ..........................................................................................
PAGE 7
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 9
‫‪ .
PAGE 10
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪.(Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 11
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 55‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 56‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 12
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺐ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ]‪ [FREE‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬ ‫]‪[FREE‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 14
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ B‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻔﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً(‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 16
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 19
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(99‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 20
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺃﻗﺼﺎﻫﺎ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪.(2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 22
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(99‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 23
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪-‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪(Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ”ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ“ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .
PAGE 26
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ” “ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ )ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ (Bluetooth‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫“‬ ‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫”‬ ‫“‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫”‬ ‫”‬ ‫“‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫”‪.“DISP‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫”‪ “am (pm)”/“24h‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫]‪.[CARD‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪.[CARD‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (29‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 31
‫‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ(‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(39‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 42‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(45‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 46‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (14‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻂء ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(9‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(27‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ” “ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ”‪) “¥‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺧﺮﻭﺝ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻭ ًﻳﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﻟﻴﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫”‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(25‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫”‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪.ART SHOT‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Make-up‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪.ART SHOT‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.4X‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫” “ )ﺯﻭﻭﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ )”‪ (“–” ،“+‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ “–” ،“+‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫– )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬ ‫‪) +‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ(‬ ‫‪) +‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ( ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .Full HD‬ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪Full HD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪٩:١٦‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ” “ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ“ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .
PAGE 44
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪3 “REC‬‬ ‫‪Make-up 3 MENU 3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ،Make-up‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪3 “REC‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪3 “REC‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪14M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٢٤٠x٤٣٢٠‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٤٣٢x٤٣٢٠‬‬ ‫‪5M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٩٢٠x٢٥٦٠‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪14M‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫‪5M‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪3 “REC‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 42‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪(EV‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪3 “REC‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪EV‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (EV‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ –2.0EV :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2.0EV‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪1/3EV :‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ”‪ “+‬ﻭ”–“ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪3 “REC‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪3 “REC‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ ،(ON‬ﺗﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًّﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(ON‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًّﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ ،(OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(54‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(9‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(27‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 51
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.52‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(9‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪) “6‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”|“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.“.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.2X‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”]“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ )ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻬﺎ )ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ )ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (58‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ )ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (58‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ”‪“–1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ .٩:١٦‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪+1‬‬ ‫‪–1‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ( ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (Android) Google Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (iOS) App Store‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ١٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 66
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ‪ :iPhone‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫– ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ :Android‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،iPhone‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ .EXILIM Link‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.44‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ ﺃﻭ ”‬ ‫“ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠١‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٢٠٤٩‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫”‪ ،“am (pm)”/“24h‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ " “‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Language 3‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“Language‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 104‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺮﺓ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (74‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 73
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(77 ،74‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(79 ،76‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 75
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ”‪.“DCIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ QuickTime 7‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://www.apple.com/quicktime/‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫‪ ،iPhoto‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Macintosh‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ OS X 10.
PAGE 78
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.21‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.81‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(81‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 81
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪DCIM‬‬ ‫‪100CASIO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪CIMG0001.JPG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪CIMG0002.MOV‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪DCIM‬‬ ‫‪101CASIO‬‬ ‫‪102CASIO‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 82
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 83
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.
PAGE 84
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪) [RESET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(7‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 85
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫"‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺯﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺴﻘﻮﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪) [RESET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(7‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 87
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺤﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺄﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 88
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫– ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ‬ ‫– ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺂﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﻓﺄﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 89
‫ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺠﺤﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ* ﻓﻮﻕ ﻟﻮﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺋﻘﻲ )ﻣﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﺸﺒﻴﺔ(*‪.‬‬ ‫* ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ٦) .MIL-Standard 810F Method 516.5-Shock‬ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ٤ ،‬ﺣﻮﺍﻑ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ )‪ IEC/JIS Class 6 (IPX6‬ﻭ)‪ .
PAGE 90
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻐﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺬﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻴﻨﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 91
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [CARD‬ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [USB‬ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻏﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺬﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺩﻟﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎء ﻋﺬﺏ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ً‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 93
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﺵ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 95
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 97
iPerf (BSD License) Copyright (c) The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois All Rights Reserved. Iperf performance test Mark Gates Ajay Tirumala Jim Ferguson Jon Dugan Feng Qin Kevin Gibbs John Estabrook National Laboratory for Applied Network Research National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign http://www.ncsa.uiuc.
PAGE 98
inet_ntop, inet_pton ISC License (ISC) [OSI Approved License] Copyright (C) 1996-2001 Internet Software Consortium. Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.
PAGE 99
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 101
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺠﺮﺡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ‪ Phillips‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﺎ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺭﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﻣّﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺭﺟﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 103
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 29‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(70‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 105
‫‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪5 min‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ‪ +‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(55‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 106
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(18‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(18‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(68‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(69‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(69‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*microSD‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪(٣٢٤٠x٤٣٢٠) 14M‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٤٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫‪٣١٩٩‬‬ ‫‪(٢٤٣٢x٤٣٢٠) 16:9‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٢٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪١٨‬‬ ‫‪٤٣٥٥‬‬ ‫‪(١٩٢٠x٢٥٦٠) 5M‬‬ ‫‪ ١٫١٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪٣٩‬‬ ‫‪٩٠٤٠‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪Full HD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫‪ ١٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛ
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Exif) JPEG‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2.3‬؛ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 2.0‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ H.
PAGE 114
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ٢٫٠ TFT‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٢٣٠٤٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪Capacitive‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺼ ّﻐﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪/USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫)ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪/USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠ
PAGE 115
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٢٫٨ ،‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٢٫٦ ،‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ُ ٦٠٫٩ :‬‬ ‫)ﻗﻄﺮ( ‪ُ ٢٨٫٨ x‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪) ٤٩٫٧ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٨٤٫٢ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ُ ١٨٫٩ x‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬ ‫)ﻣﻊ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪) ٦٠٫٩ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ١٥٣٫١ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ُ ٣٤٫٢ x‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬ ‫)ﻣﻊ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٦٣‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ٨٠ :‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘ
PAGE 117
ً ‫ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬ 0560 Manufacturer: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan Responsible within the European Union: CASIO EUROPE GmbH Casio-Platz 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany The copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found on http://world.casio.com/ce/dc/. To comply with the relevant European RF exposure compliance requirements, this EX-FR10, EX-FR10CT must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with other transmitter.
PAGE 118
.‫ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬FCC ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ GUIDELINES LAID DOWN BY FCC RULES FOR USE OF THIS UNIT IN THE U.S.A. (not applicable to other areas). NOTICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
PAGE 119
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.